xref: /linux/include/net/mac80211.h (revision d2912cb15bdda8ba4a5dd73396ad62641af2f520)
1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4  *
5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2019 Intel Corporation
11  */
12 
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15 
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25 
26 /**
27  * DOC: Introduction
28  *
29  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32  * drivers.
33  */
34 
35 /**
36  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37  *
38  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43  * tasklet function.
44  *
45  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
46  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47  */
48 
49 /**
50  * DOC: Warning
51  *
52  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54  */
55 
56 /**
57  * DOC: Frame format
58  *
59  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62  * hardware.
63  *
64  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65  *
66  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68  *
69  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71  */
72 
73 /**
74  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75  *
76  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80  *
81  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82  * suspend.
83  *
84  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85  *
86  */
87 
88 /**
89  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90  *
91  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93  * between different stations/interfaces.
94  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97  *
98  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99  * driver operation.
100  *
101  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
102  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
103  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104  *
105  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107  *
108  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
109  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
110  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111  *
112  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
113  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
114  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
115  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
116  * ieee80211_return_txq().
117  *
118  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
119  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
120  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
121  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
122  * .release_buffered_frames().
123  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
124  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
125  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
126  */
127 
128 struct device;
129 
130 /**
131  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
132  *
133  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
135  */
136 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
138 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
139 };
140 
141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
142 
143 /**
144  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
145  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
146  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
147  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
148  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
149  */
150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
151 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
152 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
153 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
154 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
155 };
156 
157 /**
158  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
159  *
160  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
162  *
163  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
165  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
166  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
170  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
171  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
172  */
173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174 	u16 txop;
175 	u16 cw_min;
176 	u16 cw_max;
177 	u8 aifs;
178 	bool acm;
179 	bool uapsd;
180 	bool mu_edca;
181 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182 };
183 
184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
185 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
186 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
187 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
188 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
189 };
190 
191 /**
192  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
197  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199  */
200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
202 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
203 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
204 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
205 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
206 };
207 
208 /**
209  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
210  *
211  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
212  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
213  *
214  * @def: the channel definition
215  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
217  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
218  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
219  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
223  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
224  */
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228 
229 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
230 
231 	bool radar_enabled;
232 
233 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234 };
235 
236 /**
237  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
238  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
239  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
240  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
241  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
242  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
243  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
244  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
245  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
246  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
247  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
248  *      for changes/removal.)
249  */
250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
251 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
252 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
253 };
254 
255 /**
256  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
257  *
258  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
259  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
260  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
261  * done.
262  *
263  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
264  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
265  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
266  */
267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
268 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
269 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
270 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
271 };
272 
273 /**
274  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
275  *
276  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
277  * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
278  *
279  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
280  *	also implies a change in the AID.
281  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
282  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
284  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
288  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
289  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
290  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
291  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
292  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
297  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304  *	changed
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
306  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
308  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
309  *	context had been assigned.
310  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
313  *	keep alive) changed.
314  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fime timing reasurement request responder
316  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317  *
318  */
319 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
320 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
321 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
322 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
323 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
324 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
325 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
326 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
327 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
328 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
329 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
330 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
331 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
332 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
333 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
334 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
335 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
336 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
337 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
338 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
339 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
340 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
341 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
342 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
343 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
344 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
345 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
347 
348 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
349 };
350 
351 /*
352  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
353  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
354  * filtering will be disabled.
355  */
356 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
357 
358 /**
359  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
360  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
361  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
362  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
363  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
364  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
365  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
366  */
367 enum ieee80211_event_type {
368 	RSSI_EVENT,
369 	MLME_EVENT,
370 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
371 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
372 };
373 
374 /**
375  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
376  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
377  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
378  */
379 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
380 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
381 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
382 };
383 
384 /**
385  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
386  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
387  */
388 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
389 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
390 };
391 
392 /**
393  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
394  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
395  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
396  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
397  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
398  */
399 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
400 	AUTH_EVENT,
401 	ASSOC_EVENT,
402 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
403 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
404 };
405 
406 /**
407  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
408  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
409  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
410  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
411  */
412 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
413 	MLME_SUCCESS,
414 	MLME_DENIED,
415 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
416 };
417 
418 /**
419  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
420  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
421  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
422  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
423  */
424 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
425 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
426 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
427 	u16 reason;
428 };
429 
430 /**
431  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
432  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
433  * @tid: the tid
434  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
435  */
436 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
437 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
438 	u16 tid;
439 	u16 ssn;
440 };
441 
442 /**
443  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
444  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
445  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
446  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
447  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
448  * @u:union holding the fields above
449  */
450 struct ieee80211_event {
451 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
452 	union {
453 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
454 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
455 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
456 	} u;
457 };
458 
459 /**
460  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
461  *
462  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
463  *
464  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
465  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
466  */
467 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
468 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
469 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
470 };
471 
472 /**
473  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
474  *
475  * @lci: LCI subelement content
476  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
477  * @lci_len: LCI data length
478  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
479  */
480 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
481 	const u8 *lci;
482 	const u8 *civicloc;
483 	size_t lci_len;
484 	size_t civicloc_len;
485 };
486 
487 /**
488  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
489  *
490  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
491  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
492  *
493  * @bss_color: 6-bit value to mark inter-BSS frame, if BSS supports HE
494  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
495  * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
496  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
497  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
498  *	ACK, BACK or both
499  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
500  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
501  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
502  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
503  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
504  * @assoc: association status
505  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
506  *	or not
507  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
508  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
509  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
510  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
511  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
512  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
513  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
514  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
515  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
516  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
517  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
518  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
519  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
520  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
521  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
522  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
523  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
524  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
525  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
526  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
527  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
528  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
529  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
530  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
531  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
532  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
533  *	the current band.
534  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
535  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
536  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
537  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
538  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
539  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
540  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
541  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
542  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
543  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
544  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
545  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
546  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
547  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
548  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
549  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
550  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
551  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
552  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
553  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
554  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
555  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
556  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
557  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
558  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
559  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
560  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
561  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
562  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
563  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
564  *	your driver/device needs to do.
565  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
566  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
567  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
568  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
569  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
570  * @txpower: TX power in dBm
571  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
572  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
573  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
574  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
575  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
576  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
577  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
578  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
579  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
580  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
581  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
582  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
583  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
584  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
585  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
586  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
587  *	station.
588  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
589  *	responder functionality.
590  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
591  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
592  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
593  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
594  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
595  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
596  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
597  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
598  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
599  */
600 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
601 	const u8 *bssid;
602 	u8 bss_color;
603 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
604 	bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
605 	bool uora_exists;
606 	bool ack_enabled;
607 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
608 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
609 	bool he_support;
610 	bool twt_requester;
611 	/* association related data */
612 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
613 	bool ibss_creator;
614 	u16 aid;
615 	/* erp related data */
616 	bool use_cts_prot;
617 	bool use_short_preamble;
618 	bool use_short_slot;
619 	bool enable_beacon;
620 	u8 dtim_period;
621 	u16 beacon_int;
622 	u16 assoc_capability;
623 	u64 sync_tsf;
624 	u32 sync_device_ts;
625 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
626 	u32 basic_rates;
627 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
628 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
629 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
630 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
631 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
632 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
633 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
634 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
635 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
636 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
637 	int arp_addr_cnt;
638 	bool qos;
639 	bool idle;
640 	bool ps;
641 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
642 	size_t ssid_len;
643 	bool hidden_ssid;
644 	int txpower;
645 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
646 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
647 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
648 	u16 max_idle_period;
649 	bool protected_keep_alive;
650 	bool ftm_responder;
651 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
652 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
653 	bool nontransmitted;
654 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
655 	u8 bssid_index;
656 	u8 bssid_indicator;
657 	bool ema_ap;
658 	u8 profile_periodicity;
659 };
660 
661 /**
662  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
663  *
664  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
665  *
666  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
667  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
668  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
669  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
670  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
671  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
672  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
673  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
674  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
675  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
676  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
677  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
678  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
679  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
680  *	station
681  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
682  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
683  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
684  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
685  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
686  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
687  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
688  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
689  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
690  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
691  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
692  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
693  *	hardware queue.
694  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
695  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
696  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
697  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
698  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
699  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
700  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
701  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
702  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
703  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
704  *	off-channel operation.
705  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
706  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
707  *	it can be sent out.
708  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
709  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
710  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
711  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
712  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
713  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
714  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
715  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
716  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
717  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
718  *	queue gets full.
719  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
720  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
721  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
722  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
723  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
724  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
725  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
726  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
727  *	status to user space)
728  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
729  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
730  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
731  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
732  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
733  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
734  *	handled properly by the device.
735  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
736  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
737  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
738  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
739  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
740  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
741  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
742  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
743  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
744  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
745  *	PS-Poll responses.
746  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
747  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
748  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
749  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
750  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
751  *	monitor injection).
752  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
753  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
754  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
755  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
756  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
757  *
758  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
759  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
760  */
761 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
762 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
763 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
764 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
765 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
766 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
767 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
768 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
769 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
770 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
771 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
772 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
773 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
774 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
775 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
776 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(14),
777 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
778 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
779 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
780 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
781 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
782 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
783 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
784 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
785 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
786 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
787 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
788 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
789 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
790 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
791 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
792 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
793 };
794 
795 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
796 
797 /**
798  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
799  *
800  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
801  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
802  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
803  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
804  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
805  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
806  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
807  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
808  *
809  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
810  */
811 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
812 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
813 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
814 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
815 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
816 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
817 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
818 };
819 
820 /*
821  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
822  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
823  */
824 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
825 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
826 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
827 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
828 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
829 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
830 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
831 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
832 
833 /**
834  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
835  *	Rate Control algorithm.
836  *
837  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
838  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
839  *
840  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
841  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
842  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
843  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
844  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
845  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
846  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
847  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
848  *	Greenfield mode.
849  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
850  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
851  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
852  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
853  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
854  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
855  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
856  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
857  */
858 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
859 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
860 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
861 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
862 
863 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
864 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
865 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
866 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
867 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
868 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
869 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
870 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
871 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
872 };
873 
874 
875 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
876 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
877 
878 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
879 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
880 
881 /* maximum number of rate stages */
882 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
883 
884 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
885 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
886 
887 /**
888  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
889  *
890  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
891  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
892  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
893  *
894  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
895  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
896  *
897  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
898  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
899  *
900  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
901  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
902  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
903  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
904  * information::
905  *
906  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
907  *
908  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
909  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
910  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
911  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
912  * information should then contain::
913  *
914  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
915  *
916  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
917  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
918  */
919 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
920 	s8 idx;
921 	u16 count:5,
922 	    flags:11;
923 } __packed;
924 
925 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
926 
927 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
928 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
929 {
930 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
931 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
932 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
933 }
934 
935 static inline u8
936 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
937 {
938 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
939 }
940 
941 static inline u8
942 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
943 {
944 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
945 }
946 
947 /**
948  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
949  *
950  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
951  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
952  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
953  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
954  *
955  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
956  * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
957  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
958  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
959  * @control: union part for control data
960  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
961  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
962  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
963  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
964  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
965  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
966  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
967  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
968  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
969  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
970  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
971  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
972  * @pad: padding
973  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
974  * @status: union part for status data
975  * @status.rates: attempted rates
976  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
977  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
978  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
979  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
980  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
981  * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
982  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
983  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
984  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
985  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
986  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
987  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
988  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
989  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
990  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
991  */
992 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
993 	/* common information */
994 	u32 flags;
995 	u8 band;
996 
997 	u8 hw_queue;
998 
999 	u16 ack_frame_id;
1000 
1001 	union {
1002 		struct {
1003 			union {
1004 				/* rate control */
1005 				struct {
1006 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1007 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1008 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1009 					u8 use_rts:1;
1010 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1011 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1012 					u8 skip_table:1;
1013 					/* 2 bytes free */
1014 				};
1015 				/* only needed before rate control */
1016 				unsigned long jiffies;
1017 			};
1018 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1019 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1020 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1021 			u32 flags;
1022 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1023 		} control;
1024 		struct {
1025 			u64 cookie;
1026 		} ack;
1027 		struct {
1028 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1029 			s32 ack_signal;
1030 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1031 			u8 ampdu_len;
1032 			u8 antenna;
1033 			u16 tx_time;
1034 			bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1035 			void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1036 		} status;
1037 		struct {
1038 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1039 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1040 			u8 pad[4];
1041 
1042 			void *rate_driver_data[
1043 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1044 		};
1045 		void *driver_data[
1046 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1047 	};
1048 };
1049 
1050 /**
1051  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
1052  *
1053  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1054  * @info: Basic tx status information
1055  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1056  */
1057 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1058 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1059 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1060 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1061 };
1062 
1063 /**
1064  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1065  *
1066  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1067  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1068  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1069  *
1070  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1071  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1072  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1073  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1074  */
1075 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1076 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1077 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1078 	const u8 *common_ies;
1079 	size_t common_ie_len;
1080 };
1081 
1082 
1083 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1084 {
1085 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1086 }
1087 
1088 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1089 {
1090 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1091 }
1092 
1093 /**
1094  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1095  *
1096  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1097  *
1098  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1099  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1100  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1101  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1102  *
1103  * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1104  *	 info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1105  *	 instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1106  */
1107 static inline void
1108 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1109 {
1110 	int i;
1111 
1112 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1113 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1114 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1115 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1116 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1117 	/* clear the rate counts */
1118 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1119 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1120 
1121 	BUILD_BUG_ON(
1122 	    offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1123 	memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1124 	       sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1125 	       offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1126 }
1127 
1128 
1129 /**
1130  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1131  *
1132  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1133  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1134  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1135  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1136  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1137  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1138  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1139  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1140  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1141  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1142  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1143  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1144  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1145  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1146  *	de-duplication by itself.
1147  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1148  *	the frame.
1149  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1150  *	the frame.
1151  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1152  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1153  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1154  *	merging.
1155  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1156  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1157  *	(including FCS) was received.
1158  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1159  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1160  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1161  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1162  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1163  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1164  *	each A-MPDU
1165  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1166  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1167  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1168  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1169  *	on this subframe
1170  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1171  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1172  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1173  *	done by the hardware
1174  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1175  *	processing it in any regular way.
1176  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1177  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1178  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1179  *	monitor interfaces.
1180  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1181  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1182  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1183  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1184  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1185  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1186  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1187  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1188  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1189  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1190  *	interleaved with other frames.
1191  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1192  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1193  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1194  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1195  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1196  *	the first subframe.
1197  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1198  *	be done in the hardware.
1199  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1200  *	frame
1201  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1202  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1203  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1204  *
1205  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1206  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1207  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1208  *	 - DATA5_GI
1209  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1210  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1211  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1212  *
1213  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1214  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1215  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1216  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1217  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1218  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1219  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1220  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1221  */
1222 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1223 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1224 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1225 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1226 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1227 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1228 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1229 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1230 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1231 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1232 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1233 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1234 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1235 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1236 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1237 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1238 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1239 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1240 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1241 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1242 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1243 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1244 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1245 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1246 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1247 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1248 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1249 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1250 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1251 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1252 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1253 };
1254 
1255 /**
1256  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1257  *
1258  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1259  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1260  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1261  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1262  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1263  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1264  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1265  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1266  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1267  */
1268 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1269 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1270 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1271 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1272 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1273 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1274 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1275 };
1276 
1277 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1278 
1279 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1280 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1281 	RX_ENC_HT,
1282 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1283 	RX_ENC_HE,
1284 };
1285 
1286 /**
1287  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1288  *
1289  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1290  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1291  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1292  *
1293  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1294  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1295  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1296  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1297  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1298  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1299  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1300  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1301  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1302  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1303  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1304  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1305  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1306  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1307  *	values were filled.
1308  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1309  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1310  * @antenna: antenna used
1311  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1312  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1313  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1314  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1315  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1316  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1317  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1318  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1319  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1320  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1321  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1322  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1323  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1324  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1325  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1326  */
1327 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1328 	u64 mactime;
1329 	u64 boottime_ns;
1330 	u32 device_timestamp;
1331 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1332 	u32 flag;
1333 	u16 freq;
1334 	u8 enc_flags;
1335 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1336 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1337 	u8 rate_idx;
1338 	u8 nss;
1339 	u8 rx_flags;
1340 	u8 band;
1341 	u8 antenna;
1342 	s8 signal;
1343 	u8 chains;
1344 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1345 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1346 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1347 };
1348 
1349 /**
1350  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1351  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1352  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1353  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1354  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1355  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1356  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1357  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1358  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1359  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1360  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1361  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1362  *	@data field.
1363  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1364  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1365  *	length
1366  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1367  *
1368  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1369  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1370  * data.
1371  */
1372 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1373 	u32 present;
1374 	u8 align;
1375 	u8 oui[3];
1376 	u8 subns;
1377 	u8 pad;
1378 	u16 len;
1379 	u8 data[];
1380 } __packed;
1381 
1382 /**
1383  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1384  *
1385  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1386  *
1387  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1388  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1389  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1390  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1391  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1392  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1393  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1394  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1395  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1396  *	for more.
1397  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1398  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1399  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1400  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1401  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1402  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1403  *	operating channel.
1404  */
1405 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1406 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1407 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1408 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1409 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1410 };
1411 
1412 
1413 /**
1414  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1415  *
1416  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1417  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1418  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1419  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1420  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1421  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1422  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1423  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1424  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1425  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1426  */
1427 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1428 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1429 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1430 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1431 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1432 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1433 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1434 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1435 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1436 };
1437 
1438 /**
1439  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1440  *
1441  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1442  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1443  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1444  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1445  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1446  */
1447 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1448 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1449 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1450 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1451 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1452 
1453 	/* keep last */
1454 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1455 };
1456 
1457 /**
1458  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1459  *
1460  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1461  *
1462  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1463  *
1464  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1465  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1466  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1467  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1468  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1469  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1470  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1471  *
1472  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1473  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1474  *
1475  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1476  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1477  *
1478  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1479  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1480  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1481  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1482  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1483  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1484  *
1485  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1486  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1487  *	configured for an HT channel.
1488  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1489  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1490  */
1491 struct ieee80211_conf {
1492 	u32 flags;
1493 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1494 
1495 	u16 listen_interval;
1496 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1497 
1498 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1499 
1500 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1501 	bool radar_enabled;
1502 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1503 };
1504 
1505 /**
1506  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1507  *
1508  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1509  * operation.
1510  *
1511  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1512  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1513  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1514  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1515  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1516  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1517  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1518  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1519  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1520  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1521  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1522   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1523   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1524  */
1525 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1526 	u64 timestamp;
1527 	u32 device_timestamp;
1528 	bool block_tx;
1529 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1530 	u8 count;
1531 	u32 delay;
1532 };
1533 
1534 /**
1535  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1536  *
1537  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1538  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1539  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1540  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1541  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1542  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1543  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1544  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1545  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1546  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1547  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1548  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1549  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1550  */
1551 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1552 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1553 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1554 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1555 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1556 };
1557 
1558 /**
1559  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1560  *
1561  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1562  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1563  *
1564  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1565  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1566  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1567  * @addr: address of this interface
1568  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1569  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1570  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1571  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1572  *	for read access.
1573  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1574  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1575  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1576  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1577  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1578  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1579  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1580  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1581  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1582  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1583  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1584  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1585  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1586  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1587  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1588  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1589  *	interface.
1590  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1591  *	sizeof(void \*).
1592  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1593  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1594  *	protected by fq->lock.
1595  */
1596 struct ieee80211_vif {
1597 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1598 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1599 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1600 	bool p2p;
1601 	bool csa_active;
1602 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
1603 
1604 	u8 cab_queue;
1605 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1606 
1607 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1608 
1609 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1610 
1611 	u32 driver_flags;
1612 
1613 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1614 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1615 #endif
1616 
1617 	unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1618 
1619 	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1620 
1621 	/* must be last */
1622 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1623 };
1624 
1625 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1626 {
1627 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1628 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1629 #endif
1630 	return false;
1631 }
1632 
1633 /**
1634  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1635  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1636  *
1637  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1638  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1639  *
1640  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1641  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1642  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1643  */
1644 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1645 
1646 /**
1647  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1648  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1649  *
1650  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1651  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1652  *
1653  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1654  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1655  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1656  */
1657 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1658 
1659 /**
1660  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1661  *
1662  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1663  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1664  *
1665  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1666  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1667  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1668  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1669  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1670  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1671  *	generation in software.
1672  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1673  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1674  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1675  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1676  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1677  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1678  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1679  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1680  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1681  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1682  *	MIC.
1683  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1684  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1685  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1686  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1687  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1688  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1689  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1690  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1691  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1692  *	only for managment frames (MFP).
1693  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1694  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1695  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1696  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1697  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1698  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1699  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1700  */
1701 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1702 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1703 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1704 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1705 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1706 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1707 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1708 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1709 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1710 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1711 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1712 };
1713 
1714 /**
1715  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1716  *
1717  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1718  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1719  *
1720  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1721  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1722  *	encrypted in hardware.
1723  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1724  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1725  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1726  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1727  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1728  * @keylen: key material length
1729  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1730  * 	data block:
1731  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1732  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1733  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1734  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1735  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1736  */
1737 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1738 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1739 	u32 cipher;
1740 	u8 icv_len;
1741 	u8 iv_len;
1742 	u8 hw_key_idx;
1743 	s8 keyidx;
1744 	u16 flags;
1745 	u8 keylen;
1746 	u8 key[0];
1747 };
1748 
1749 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
1750 
1751 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1752 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1753 
1754 /**
1755  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1756  *
1757  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1758  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1759  *	reverse order than in packet)
1760  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1761  *	reverse order than in packet)
1762  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1763  *	reverse order than in packet)
1764  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1765  *	reverse order than in packet)
1766  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1767  */
1768 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1769 	union {
1770 		struct {
1771 			u32 iv32;
1772 			u16 iv16;
1773 		} tkip;
1774 		struct {
1775 			u8 pn[6];
1776 		} ccmp;
1777 		struct {
1778 			u8 pn[6];
1779 		} aes_cmac;
1780 		struct {
1781 			u8 pn[6];
1782 		} aes_gmac;
1783 		struct {
1784 			u8 pn[6];
1785 		} gcmp;
1786 		struct {
1787 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1788 			u8 seq_len;
1789 		} hw;
1790 	};
1791 };
1792 
1793 /**
1794  * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1795  *
1796  * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1797  * the secure packet crypto handling.
1798  *
1799  * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1800  * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1801  * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1802  * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1803  * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1804  * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1805  * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1806  * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1807  *     key_idx value calculation:
1808  *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1809  * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1810  */
1811 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1812 	u32 cipher;
1813 	u16 iftype;
1814 	u8 hdr_len;
1815 	u8 pn_len;
1816 	u8 pn_off;
1817 	u8 key_idx_off;
1818 	u8 key_idx_mask;
1819 	u8 key_idx_shift;
1820 	u8 mic_len;
1821 };
1822 
1823 /**
1824  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1825  *
1826  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1827  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1828  *
1829  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1830  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1831  */
1832 enum set_key_cmd {
1833 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1834 };
1835 
1836 /**
1837  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1838  *
1839  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1840  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1841  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1842  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1843  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1844  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1845  */
1846 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1847 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1848 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1849 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1850 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1851 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1852 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1853 };
1854 
1855 /**
1856  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1857  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1858  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1859  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1860  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1861  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
1862  *
1863  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1864  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
1865  */
1866 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1867 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1868 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1869 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1870 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1871 };
1872 
1873 /**
1874  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1875  *
1876  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1877  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1878  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1879  */
1880 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1881 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1882 	struct {
1883 		s8 idx;
1884 		u8 count;
1885 		u8 count_cts;
1886 		u8 count_rts;
1887 		u16 flags;
1888 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1889 };
1890 
1891 /**
1892  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
1893  *
1894  * Used to configure txpower for station.
1895  *
1896  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
1897  *	to the STA.
1898  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
1899  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
1900  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
1901  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
1902  *	per peer TPC.
1903  */
1904 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
1905 	s16 power;
1906 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
1907 };
1908 
1909 /**
1910  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1911  *
1912  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1913  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1914  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1915  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1916  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1917  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1918  *
1919  * @addr: MAC address
1920  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1921  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1922  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1923  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1924  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1925  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1926  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1927  *	Can be modified by driver.
1928  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1929  *	otherwise always false)
1930  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1931  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1932  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1933  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1934  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1935  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1936  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1937  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1938  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1939  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1940  *	the station moves to associated state.
1941  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1942  * @rates: rate control selection table
1943  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
1944  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1945  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
1946  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
1947  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1948  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1949  *	unlimited.
1950  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
1951  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
1952  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
1953  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1954  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
1955  */
1956 struct ieee80211_sta {
1957 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1958 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1959 	u16 aid;
1960 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
1961 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
1962 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
1963 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
1964 	bool wme;
1965 	u8 uapsd_queues;
1966 	u8 max_sp;
1967 	u8 rx_nss;
1968 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
1969 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1970 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
1971 	bool tdls;
1972 	bool tdls_initiator;
1973 	bool mfp;
1974 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
1975 
1976 	/**
1977 	 * @max_amsdu_len:
1978 	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1979 	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1980 	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1981 	 *
1982 	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1983 	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1984 	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1985 	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1986 	 *
1987 	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
1988 	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
1989 	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1990 	 */
1991 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
1992 	bool support_p2p_ps;
1993 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
1994 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1995 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
1996 
1997 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
1998 
1999 	/* must be last */
2000 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2001 };
2002 
2003 /**
2004  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2005  *
2006  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2007  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2008  *
2009  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2010  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2011  */
2012 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2013 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2014 };
2015 
2016 /**
2017  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2018  *
2019  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2020  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2021  */
2022 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2023 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2024 };
2025 
2026 /**
2027  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2028  *
2029  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2030  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2031  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2032  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2033  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2034  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2035  *
2036  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2037  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2038  */
2039 struct ieee80211_txq {
2040 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2041 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2042 	u8 tid;
2043 	u8 ac;
2044 
2045 	/* must be last */
2046 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2047 };
2048 
2049 /**
2050  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2051  *
2052  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2053  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2054  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2055  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2056  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2057  *
2058  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2059  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2060  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2061  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2062  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2063  *	algorithm.
2064  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2065  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2066  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2067  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2068  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2069  *	CCK frames.
2070  *
2071  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2072  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2073  *	the FCS at the end.
2074  *
2075  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2076  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2077  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2078  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2079  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2080  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2081  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2082  *
2083  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2084  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2085  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2086  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2087  *
2088  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2089  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2090  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2091  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2092  *
2093  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2094  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2095  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2096  *
2097  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2098  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2099  *
2100  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2101  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2102  *
2103  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2104  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2105  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2106  *
2107  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2108  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2109  *
2110  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2111  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2112  *
2113  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2114  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2115  *	the stack.
2116  *
2117  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2118  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2119  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2120  *
2121  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2122  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2123  *	dtim_period).
2124  *
2125  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2126  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2127  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2128  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2129  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2130  *	only in that case.
2131  *
2132  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2133  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2134  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2135  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2136  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2137  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2138  *
2139  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2140  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2141  *	software.
2142  *
2143  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2144  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2145  *	active interfaces.
2146  *
2147  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2148  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2149  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2150  *
2151  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2152  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2153  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2154  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2155  *	supported cipher suites.
2156  *
2157  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2158  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2159  *	for frames.
2160  *
2161  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2162  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2163  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2164  *	control for more details.
2165  *
2166  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2167  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2168  *
2169  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2170  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2171  *	is supported.
2172  *
2173  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2174  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2175  *
2176  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2177  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2178  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2179  *
2180  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2181  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2182  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2183  *	CSA frame.
2184  *
2185  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2186  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2187  *
2188  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2189  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2190  *
2191  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2192  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2193  *
2194  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2195  *	within A-MPDU.
2196  *
2197  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2198  *	for sent beacons.
2199  *
2200  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2201  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2202  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2203  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2204  *
2205  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2206  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2207  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2208  *	timeout.
2209  *
2210  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2211  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2212  *
2213  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2214  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2215  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2216  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2217  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2218  *
2219  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2220  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2221  *
2222  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2223  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2224  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2225  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2226  *
2227  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2228  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2229  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2230  *
2231  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2232  *	TDLS links.
2233  *
2234  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2235  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2236  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2237  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2238  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2239  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2240  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2241  *
2242  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2243  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2244  *
2245  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2246  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2247  *
2248  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2249  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2250  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2251  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2252  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2253  *
2254  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2255  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2256  *	TXQs to start with.
2257  *
2258  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2259  *	length in tx status information
2260  *
2261  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2262  *
2263  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2264  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2265  *
2266  * @IEEE80211_HW_EXT_KEY_ID_NATIVE: Driver and hardware are supporting Extended
2267  *	Key ID and can handle two unicast keys per station for Rx and Tx.
2268  *
2269  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2270  */
2271 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2272 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2273 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2274 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2275 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2276 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2277 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2278 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2279 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2280 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2281 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2282 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2283 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2284 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2285 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2286 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2287 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2288 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2289 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2290 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2291 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2292 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2293 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2294 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2295 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2296 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2297 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2298 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2299 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2300 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2301 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2302 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2303 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2304 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2305 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2306 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2307 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2308 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2309 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2310 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2311 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2312 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2313 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2314 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2315 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2316 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2317 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2318 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2319 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2320 	IEEE80211_HW_EXT_KEY_ID_NATIVE,
2321 
2322 	/* keep last, obviously */
2323 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2324 };
2325 
2326 /**
2327  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2328  *
2329  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2330  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2331  *
2332  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2333  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2334  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2335  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2336  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2337  *
2338  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2339  *
2340  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2341  *	along with this structure.
2342  *
2343  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2344  *
2345  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2346  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2347  *
2348  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2349  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2350  *
2351  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2352  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2353  *
2354  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2355  *	that HW supports
2356  *
2357  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2358  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2359  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2360  *
2361  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2362  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2363  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2364  *
2365  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2366  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2367  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2368  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2369  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2370  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2371  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2372  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2373  *
2374  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2375  *	can handle.
2376  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2377  *	the hw can report back.
2378  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2379  *
2380  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2381  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2382  *	aggregation.
2383  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2384  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2385  *	it shouldn't be set.
2386  *
2387  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2388  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2389  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2390  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2391  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2392  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2393  *
2394  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2395  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2396  *
2397  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2398  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2399  *
2400  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2401  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2402  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2403  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2404  *
2405  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2406  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2407  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2408  *
2409  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2410  *
2411  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2412  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2413  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2414  *	device_timestamp.
2415  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2416  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2417  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2418  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2419  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2420  *
2421  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2422  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2423  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2424  *
2425  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2426  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2427  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2428  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2429  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2430  *	neither enabled.
2431  *
2432  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2433  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2434  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2435  *
2436  * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2437  * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2438  *	supported by HW.
2439  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2440  *	device.
2441  *
2442  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2443  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2444  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2445  *
2446  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2447  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2448  */
2449 struct ieee80211_hw {
2450 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2451 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2452 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2453 	void *priv;
2454 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2455 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2456 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2457 	int vif_data_size;
2458 	int sta_data_size;
2459 	int chanctx_data_size;
2460 	int txq_data_size;
2461 	u16 queues;
2462 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2463 	s8 max_signal;
2464 	u8 max_rates;
2465 	u8 max_report_rates;
2466 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2467 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2468 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2469 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2470 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2471 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2472 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2473 	struct {
2474 		int units_pos;
2475 		s16 accuracy;
2476 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2477 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2478 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2479 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2480 	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2481 	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2482 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2483 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2484 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2485 };
2486 
2487 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2488 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2489 {
2490 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2491 }
2492 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2493 
2494 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2495 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2496 {
2497 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2498 }
2499 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2500 
2501 /**
2502  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2503  *
2504  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2505  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2506  */
2507 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2508 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2509 
2510 	/* Keep last */
2511 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2512 };
2513 
2514 /**
2515  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2516  *
2517  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2518  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2519  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2520  * @status: channel-switch response status
2521  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2522  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2523  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2524  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2525  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2526  */
2527 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2528 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2529 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2530 	u8 action_code;
2531 	u32 status;
2532 	u32 timestamp;
2533 	u16 switch_time;
2534 	u16 switch_timeout;
2535 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2536 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2537 };
2538 
2539 /**
2540  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2541  *
2542  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2543  *
2544  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2545  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2546  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2547  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2548  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2549  *
2550  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2551  */
2552 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2553 
2554 /**
2555  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2556  *
2557  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2558  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2559  */
2560 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2561 {
2562 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2563 }
2564 
2565 /**
2566  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2567  *
2568  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2569  * @addr: the address to set
2570  */
2571 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2572 {
2573 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2574 }
2575 
2576 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2577 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2578 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2579 {
2580 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2581 		return NULL;
2582 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2583 }
2584 
2585 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2586 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2587 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2588 {
2589 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2590 		return NULL;
2591 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2592 }
2593 
2594 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2595 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2596 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2597 {
2598 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2599 		return NULL;
2600 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2601 }
2602 
2603 /**
2604  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2605  * @hw: the hardware
2606  * @skb: the skb
2607  *
2608  * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2609  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2610  */
2611 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2612 
2613 /**
2614  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2615  *
2616  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2617  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2618  *
2619  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2620  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2621  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2622  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2623  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2624  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2625  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2626  *
2627  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2628  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2629  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2630  *
2631  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2632  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2633  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2634  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2635  *
2636  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2637  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2638  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2639  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2640  *
2641  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2642  *
2643  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2644  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2645  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2646  * based on the receive flags.
2647  *
2648  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2649  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2650  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2651  * keys.
2652  *
2653  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2654  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2655  * handler.
2656  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2657  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2658  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2659  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2660  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2661  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2662  *
2663  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2664  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2665  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2666  *
2667  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2668  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2669  * requirements:
2670  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2671       mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2672       completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2673    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2674       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2675    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2676       encrypted with the new key and
2677    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2678    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2679  */
2680 
2681 /**
2682  * DOC: Powersave support
2683  *
2684  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2685  *
2686  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2687  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2688  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2689  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2690  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2691  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2692  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2693  * it finds traffic directed to it.
2694  *
2695  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2696  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2697  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2698  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2699  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2700  *
2701  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2702  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2703  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2704  *
2705  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2706  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2707  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2708  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2709  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2710  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2711  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2712  *
2713  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2714  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2715  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2716  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2717  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2718  * periods.
2719  *
2720  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2721  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2722  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2723  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2724  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2725  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2726  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2727  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2728  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2729  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2730  *
2731  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2732  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2733  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2734  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2735  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2736  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2737  *
2738  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2739  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2740  */
2741 
2742 /**
2743  * DOC: Beacon filter support
2744  *
2745  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2746  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2747  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2748  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2749  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2750  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2751  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2752  *
2753  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2754  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2755  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2756  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2757  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2758  *
2759  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2760  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2761  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2762  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2763  *
2764  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2765  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2766  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2767  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2768  *
2769  *  - a list of information element IDs
2770  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2771  *
2772  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2773  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2774  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2775  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2776  * vendor information elements.
2777  *
2778  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2779  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2780  *
2781  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2782  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2783  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2784  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2785  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2786  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2787  *
2788  *
2789  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2790  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2791  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2792  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2793  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2794  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2795  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2796  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2797  *
2798  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2799  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2800  * signal strength threshold checking.
2801  */
2802 
2803 /**
2804  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2805  *
2806  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2807  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2808  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2809  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2810  *
2811  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2812  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2813  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2814  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2815  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2816  * hardware flags.
2817  *
2818  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2819  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2820  * turned off otherwise.
2821  *
2822  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2823  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2824  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2825  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2826  */
2827 
2828 /**
2829  * DOC: Frame filtering
2830  *
2831  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2832  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2833  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2834  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2835  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2836  *
2837  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2838  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2839  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2840  *
2841  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2842  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2843  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2844  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2845  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2846  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2847  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2848  *
2849  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2850  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2851  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2852  * or dropped.
2853  *
2854  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2855  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2856  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2857  * the flag, but not clear it.
2858  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2859  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2860  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2861  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2862  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2863  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2864  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2865  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2866  */
2867 
2868 /**
2869  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2870  *
2871  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2872  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2873  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2874  *
2875  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2876  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2877  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2878  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2879  * the driver code.
2880  *
2881  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2882  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2883  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2884  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2885  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2886  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2887  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2888  *
2889  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2890  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2891  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2892  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2893  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2894  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2895  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2896  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2897  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2898  * @sta_notify callback.
2899  *
2900  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2901  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2902  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2903  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2904  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2905  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2906  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2907  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2908  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2909  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2910  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2911  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2912  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2913  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2914  *
2915  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2916  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2917  *
2918  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2919  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2920  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2921  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2922  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2923  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2924  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2925  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2926  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2927  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2928  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2929  *
2930  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2931  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2932  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2933  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2934  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2935  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2936  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2937  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2938  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2939  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2940  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2941  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2942  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2943  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2944  *
2945  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2946  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2947  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2948  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2949  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2950  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2951  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2952  *
2953  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2954  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2955  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2956  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
2957  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
2958  *
2959  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2960  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2961  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2962  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
2963  */
2964 
2965 /**
2966  * DOC: HW queue control
2967  *
2968  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2969  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2970  * was problematic for a few reasons:
2971  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2972  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2973  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2974  *
2975  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2976  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2977  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2978  *
2979  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2980  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2981  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2982  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2983  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2984  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2985  * the hardware queue.
2986  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2987  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2988  *
2989  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2990  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2991  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2992  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2993  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2994  *
2995  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2996  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2997  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
2998  * off-channel queue:         9
2999  *
3000  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3001  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3002  *
3003  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3004  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3005  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3006  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3007  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3008  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3009  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3010  *
3011  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3012  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3013  *
3014  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3015  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3016  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3017  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3018  */
3019 
3020 /**
3021  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3022  *
3023  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3024  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3025  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3026  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3027  *
3028  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3029  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3030  *	multicast address.
3031  *
3032  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3033  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3034  *
3035  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3036  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3037  *
3038  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3039  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3040  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3041  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3042  *	honour this flag if possible.
3043  *
3044  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3045  *	station
3046  *
3047  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3048  *
3049  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3050  *
3051  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3052  */
3053 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3054 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3055 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3056 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3057 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3058 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3059 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3060 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3061 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3062 };
3063 
3064 /**
3065  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3066  *
3067  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3068  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3069  *
3070  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3071  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3072  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3073  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3074  *
3075  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3076  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3077  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
3078  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3079  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3080  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3081  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3082  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3083  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3084  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3085  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3086  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3087  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3088  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3089  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3090  */
3091 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3092 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3093 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3094 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3095 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3096 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3097 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3098 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3099 };
3100 
3101 /**
3102  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3103  *
3104  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3105  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3106  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3107  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3108  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3109  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3110  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3111  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3112  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3113  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3114  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3115  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3116  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3117  */
3118 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3119 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3120 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3121 	u16 tid;
3122 	u16 ssn;
3123 	u16 buf_size;
3124 	bool amsdu;
3125 	u16 timeout;
3126 };
3127 
3128 /**
3129  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3130  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3131  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3132  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3133  */
3134 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3135 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3136 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3137 };
3138 
3139 /**
3140  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3141  *
3142  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3143  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3144  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3145  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3146  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3147  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3148  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3149  *	the peer.
3150  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3151  *	by the peer
3152  */
3153 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3154 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3155 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3156 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3157 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3158 };
3159 
3160 /**
3161  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3162  *
3163  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3164  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3165  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
3166  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3167  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3168  *
3169  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3170  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3171  *	for sending managment frames offchannel.
3172  */
3173 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3174 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3175 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3176 };
3177 
3178 /**
3179  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3180  *
3181  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3182  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3183  *
3184  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3185  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3186  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3187  *	of wowlan configuration)
3188  */
3189 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3190 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3191 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3192 };
3193 
3194 /**
3195  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3196  *
3197  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3198  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3199  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3200  *
3201  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3202  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3203  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3204  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3205  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3206  *	Must be atomic.
3207  *
3208  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3209  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3210  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3211  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3212  *	or zero.
3213  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3214  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3215  *	is added.
3216  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3217  *
3218  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3219  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3220  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3221  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3222  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3223  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3224  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3225  *
3226  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3227  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3228  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3229  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3230  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3231  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3232  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3233  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3234  *	must return 1 from this function.
3235  *
3236  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3237  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3238  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3239  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3240  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3241  *
3242  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3243  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3244  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3245  *	in suspend().
3246  *
3247  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3248  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3249  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3250  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3251  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3252  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3253  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3254  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3255  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3256  *
3257  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3258  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3259  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3260  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3261  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3262  *
3263  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3264  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3265  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3266  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3267  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3268  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3269  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3270  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3271  *
3272  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3273  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3274  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3275  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3276  *
3277  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3278  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3279  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3280  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3281  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3282  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3283  *	can sleep.
3284  *
3285  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3286  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3287  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3288  *
3289  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3290  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3291  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3292  *
3293  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3294  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3295  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3296  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3297  *	which flags are changed.
3298  *	This callback can sleep.
3299  *
3300  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3301  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3302  *
3303  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3304  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3305  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3306  *	is enabled.
3307  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3308  *	The callback can sleep.
3309  *
3310  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3311  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3312  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3313  *	The callback must be atomic.
3314  *
3315  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3316  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3317  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3318  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3319  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3320  *
3321  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3322  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3323  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3324  *
3325  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3326  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3327  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3328  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3329  *	that power save is disabled.
3330  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3331  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3332  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3333  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3334  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3335  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3336  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3337  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3338  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3339  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3340  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3341  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3342  *	The callback can sleep.
3343  *
3344  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3345  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3346  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3347  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3348  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3349  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3350  *	The callback can sleep.
3351  *
3352  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3353  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3354  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3355  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3356  *
3357  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3358  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3359  *
3360  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3361  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3362  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3363  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3364  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3365  *
3366  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3367  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3368  *	this notification.
3369  *	The callback can sleep.
3370  *
3371  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3372  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3373  *	The callback can sleep.
3374  *
3375  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3376  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3377  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3378  *	The callback must be atomic.
3379  *
3380  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3381  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3382  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3383  *	should be set as well.
3384  *	The callback can sleep.
3385  *
3386  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3387  *	The callback can sleep.
3388  *
3389  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3390  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3391  *
3392  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3393  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3394  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3395  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3396  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3397  *	This callback can sleep.
3398  *
3399  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3400  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3401  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3402  *	callback can sleep.
3403  *
3404  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3405  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3406  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3407  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3408  *
3409  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3410  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3411  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3412  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3413  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3414  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3415  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3416  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3417  *	The callback can sleep.
3418  *
3419  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3420  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3421  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3422  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3423  *	in @sta_state.
3424  *	The callback can sleep.
3425  *
3426  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3427  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3428  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3429  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3430  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3431  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3432  *	Must be atomic.
3433  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3434  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3435  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3436  *
3437  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3438  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3439  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3440  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3441  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3442  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3443  *	The callback can sleep.
3444  *
3445  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3446  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3447  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3448  *	The callback can sleep.
3449  *
3450  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3451  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3452  *	required function.
3453  *	The callback can sleep.
3454  *
3455  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3456  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3457  *	required function.
3458  *	The callback can sleep.
3459  *
3460  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3461  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3462  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3463  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3464  *	The callback can sleep.
3465  *
3466  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3467  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3468  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3469  *	TSF synchronization.
3470  *	The callback can sleep.
3471  *
3472  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3473  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3474  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3475  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3476  *	The callback can sleep.
3477  *
3478  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3479  *
3480  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3481  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3482  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3483  *	The callback can sleep.
3484  *
3485  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3486  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3487  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3488  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3489  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3490  *
3491  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3492  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3493  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3494  *
3495  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3496  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3497  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3498  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3499  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3500  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3501  *	The callback can sleep.
3502  *
3503  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3504  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3505  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3506  *	completion of the channel switch.
3507  *
3508  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3509  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3510  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3511  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3512  *
3513  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3514  *
3515  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3516  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3517  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3518  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3519  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3520  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3521  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3522  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3523  *	must be accepted in this case.
3524  *	This callback may sleep.
3525  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3526  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3527  *
3528  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3529  *
3530  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3531  *
3532  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3533  *	queues before entering power save.
3534  *
3535  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3536  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3537  *	The callback can sleep.
3538  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3539  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3540  *	The callback must be atomic.
3541  *
3542  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3543  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3544  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3545  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3546  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3547  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3548  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3549  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3550  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3551  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3552  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3553  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3554  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3555  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3556  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3557  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3558  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3559  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3560  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3561  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3562  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3563  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3564  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3565  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3566  *	This callback must be atomic.
3567  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3568  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3569  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3570  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3571  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3572  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3573  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3574  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3575  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3576  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3577  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3578  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3579  *	This callback must be atomic.
3580  *
3581  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3582  *
3583  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3584  *
3585  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3586  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3587  *
3588  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3589  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3590  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3591  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3592  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3593  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3594  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3595  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3596  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3597  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3598  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3599  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3600  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3601  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3602  *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3603  *      duration for which the operation is requested.
3604  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3605  *
3606  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3607  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3608  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3609  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3610  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3611  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3612  *	2 * (DTIM period).
3613  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
3614  *
3615  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3616  *	This callback may sleep.
3617  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3618  *	This callback may sleep.
3619  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3620  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3621  *	channel context with different settings
3622  *	This callback may sleep.
3623  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3624  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3625  *	This callback may sleep.
3626  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3627  *	unbound from vif.
3628  *	This callback may sleep.
3629  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3630  *	another, as specified in the list of
3631  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3632  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3633  *	This callback may sleep.
3634  *
3635  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3636  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3637  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3638  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3639  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3640  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3641  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3642  *
3643  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3644  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3645  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3646  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3647  *	This callback may sleep.
3648  *
3649  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3650  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3651  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3652  *
3653  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3654  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3655  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3656  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3657  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3658  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3659  *	1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3660  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3661  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3662  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3663  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3664  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3665  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3666  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3667  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3668  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3669  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3670  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3671  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3672  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3673  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3674  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3675  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3676  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3677  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3678  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
3679  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3680  *
3681  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3682  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3683  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3684  *
3685  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3686  *	and hardware limits.
3687  *
3688  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3689  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3690  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3691  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3692  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3693  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3694  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3695  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3696  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3697  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3698  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3699  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3700  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3701  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
3702  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3703  *	the function call.
3704  *
3705  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3706  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3707  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3708  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3709  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3710  *
3711  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3712  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3713  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3714  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3715  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3716  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3717  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3718  *	changed parameters.
3719  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3720  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3721  *	this call.
3722  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3723  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3724  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3725  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3726  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3727  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3728  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3729  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3730  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3731  *
3732  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3733  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3734  */
3735 struct ieee80211_ops {
3736 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3737 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3738 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
3739 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3740 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3741 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3742 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3743 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3744 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3745 #endif
3746 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3747 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3748 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3749 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3750 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3751 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3752 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3753 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3754 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3755 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3756 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3757 				 u32 changed);
3758 
3759 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3760 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3761 
3762 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3763 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3764 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3765 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
3766 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
3767 				 u64 multicast);
3768 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3769 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3770 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
3771 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
3772 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3773 		       bool set);
3774 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3775 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3776 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3777 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3778 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3779 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3780 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3781 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3782 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3783 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3784 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3785 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3786 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3787 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3788 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3789 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3790 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3791 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3792 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3793 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3794 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3795 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3796 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3797 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3798 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3799 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
3800 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3801 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3802 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3803 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3804 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3805 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3806 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3807 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3808 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3809 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3810 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3811 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3812 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3813 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3814 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3815 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3816 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3817 				struct dentry *dir);
3818 #endif
3819 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3820 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3821 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3822 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3823 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3824 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3825 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3826 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3827 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3828 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3829 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3830 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3831 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3832 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3833 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3834 			      u32 changed);
3835 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3836 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3837 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3838 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3839 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3840 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3841 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
3842 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3843 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3844 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3845 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3846 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3847 			u64 tsf);
3848 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3849 			   s64 offset);
3850 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3851 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3852 
3853 	/**
3854 	 * @ampdu_action:
3855 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3856 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3857 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3858 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3859 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3860 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3861 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3862 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3863 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3864 	 *
3865 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3866 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3867 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
3868 	 *
3869 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3870 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3871 	 *
3872 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
3873 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
3874 	 * - ``TX:        81``
3875 	 *
3876 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3877 	 *
3878 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3879 	 * The callback can sleep.
3880 	 */
3881 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3882 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3883 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3884 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3885 		struct survey_info *survey);
3886 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3887 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3888 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3889 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3890 			    void *data, int len);
3891 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3892 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
3893 			     void *data, int len);
3894 #endif
3895 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3896 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
3897 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3898 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3899 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3900 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3901 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3902 
3903 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3904 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3905 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3906 				 int duration,
3907 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3908 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3909 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3910 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3911 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3912 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3913 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3914 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3915 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3916 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3917 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
3918 
3919 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3920 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3921 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
3922 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3923 				      bool more_data);
3924 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3925 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3926 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
3927 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3928 					bool more_data);
3929 
3930 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3931 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3932 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3933 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3934 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3935 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3936 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3937 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
3938 
3939 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3940 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3941 				  u16 duration);
3942 
3943 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3944 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3945 
3946 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3947 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3948 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3949 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3950 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3951 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3952 			       u32 changed);
3953 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3954 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3955 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3956 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3957 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3958 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3959 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3960 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3961 				  int n_vifs,
3962 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
3963 
3964 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3965 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
3966 
3967 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3968 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3969 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3970 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3971 #endif
3972 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3973 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3974 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
3975 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3976 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3977 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3978 
3979 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3980 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3981 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3982 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3983 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3984 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3985 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3986 
3987 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3988 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3989 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3990 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3991 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3992 			   int *dbm);
3993 
3994 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3995 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3996 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3997 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
3998 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
3999 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4000 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4001 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4002 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4003 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4004 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4005 
4006 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4007 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4008 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4009 
4010 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4011 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4012 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4013 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4014 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4015 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4016 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4017 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4018 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4019 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4020 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4021 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4022 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4023 			    u8 instance_id);
4024 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4025 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4026 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4027 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4028 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4029 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4030 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4031 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4032 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4033 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4034 };
4035 
4036 /**
4037  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4038  *
4039  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4040  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4041  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4042  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4043  * @priv_data_len.
4044  *
4045  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4046  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4047  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4048  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4049  *
4050  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4051  */
4052 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4053 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4054 					   const char *requested_name);
4055 
4056 /**
4057  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4058  *
4059  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4060  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4061  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4062  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4063  * @priv_data_len.
4064  *
4065  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4066  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4067  *
4068  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4069  */
4070 static inline
4071 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4072 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4073 {
4074 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4075 }
4076 
4077 /**
4078  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4079  *
4080  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4081  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4082  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4083  *
4084  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4085  *
4086  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4087  */
4088 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4089 
4090 /**
4091  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4092  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4093  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4094  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4095  */
4096 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4097 	int throughput;
4098 	int blink_time;
4099 };
4100 
4101 /**
4102  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4103  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4104  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4105  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4106  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4107  */
4108 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4109 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4110 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4111 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4112 };
4113 
4114 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4115 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4116 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4117 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4118 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4119 const char *
4120 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4121 				   unsigned int flags,
4122 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4123 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4124 #endif
4125 /**
4126  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4127  *
4128  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4129  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4130  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4131  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4132  *
4133  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4134  *
4135  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4136  */
4137 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4138 {
4139 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4140 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4141 #else
4142 	return NULL;
4143 #endif
4144 }
4145 
4146 /**
4147  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4148  *
4149  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4150  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4151  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4152  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4153  *
4154  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4155  *
4156  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4157  */
4158 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4159 {
4160 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4161 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4162 #else
4163 	return NULL;
4164 #endif
4165 }
4166 
4167 /**
4168  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4169  *
4170  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4171  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4172  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4173  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4174  *
4175  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4176  *
4177  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4178  */
4179 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4180 {
4181 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4182 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4183 #else
4184 	return NULL;
4185 #endif
4186 }
4187 
4188 /**
4189  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4190  *
4191  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4192  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4193  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4194  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4195  *
4196  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4197  *
4198  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4199  */
4200 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4201 {
4202 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4203 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4204 #else
4205 	return NULL;
4206 #endif
4207 }
4208 
4209 /**
4210  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4211  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4212  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4213  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4214  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4215  *
4216  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4217  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4218  *
4219  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4220  */
4221 static inline const char *
4222 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4223 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4224 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4225 {
4226 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4227 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4228 						  blink_table_len);
4229 #else
4230 	return NULL;
4231 #endif
4232 }
4233 
4234 /**
4235  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4236  *
4237  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4238  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4239  *
4240  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4241  */
4242 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4243 
4244 /**
4245  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4246  *
4247  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4248  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4249  * before calling this function.
4250  *
4251  * @hw: the hardware to free
4252  */
4253 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4254 
4255 /**
4256  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4257  *
4258  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4259  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4260  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4261  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4262  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4263  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4264  *
4265  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4266  */
4267 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4268 
4269 /**
4270  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4271  *
4272  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4273  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4274  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4275  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4276  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4277  *
4278  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4279  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4280  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4281  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4282  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4283  *
4284  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4285  *
4286  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4287  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4288  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4289  * @napi: the NAPI context
4290  */
4291 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4292 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4293 
4294 /**
4295  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4296  *
4297  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4298  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4299  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4300  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4301  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4302  *
4303  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4304  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4305  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4306  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4307  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4308  *
4309  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4310  *
4311  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4312  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4313  */
4314 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4315 {
4316 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4317 }
4318 
4319 /**
4320  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4321  *
4322  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4323  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4324  *
4325  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4326  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4327  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4328  *
4329  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4330  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4331  */
4332 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4333 
4334 /**
4335  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4336  *
4337  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4338  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4339  *
4340  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4341  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4342  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4343  *
4344  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4345  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4346  */
4347 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4348 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4349 {
4350 	local_bh_disable();
4351 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4352 	local_bh_enable();
4353 }
4354 
4355 /**
4356  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4357  *
4358  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4359  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4360  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4361  *
4362  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4363  *
4364  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4365  * each other.
4366  *
4367  * @sta: currently connected sta
4368  * @start: start or stop PS
4369  *
4370  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4371  */
4372 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4373 
4374 /**
4375  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4376  *                                  (in process context)
4377  *
4378  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4379  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4380  * applies.
4381  *
4382  * @sta: currently connected sta
4383  * @start: start or stop PS
4384  *
4385  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4386  */
4387 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4388 						  bool start)
4389 {
4390 	int ret;
4391 
4392 	local_bh_disable();
4393 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4394 	local_bh_enable();
4395 
4396 	return ret;
4397 }
4398 
4399 /**
4400  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4401  * @sta: currently connected station
4402  *
4403  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4404  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4405  * connected station was received.
4406  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4407  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4408  * be serialized.
4409  */
4410 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4411 
4412 /**
4413  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4414  * @sta: currently connected station
4415  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4416  *
4417  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4418  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4419  * from a connected station was received.
4420  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4421  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4422  * serialized.
4423  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4424  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4425  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4426  * checks.
4427  */
4428 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4429 
4430 /*
4431  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4432  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4433  */
4434 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4435 
4436 /**
4437  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4438  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4439  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4440  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4441  *
4442  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4443  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4444  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4445  *
4446  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4447  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4448  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4449  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4450  *
4451  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4452  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4453  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4454  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4455  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4456  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4457  *
4458  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4459  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4460  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4461  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4462  * use this API.
4463  */
4464 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4465 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4466 
4467 /**
4468  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4469  *
4470  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4471  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4472  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4473  *
4474  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4475  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4476  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4477  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4478  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4479  */
4480 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4481 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4482 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4483 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4484 			    int max_rates);
4485 
4486 /**
4487  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4488  *
4489  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4490  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4491  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4492  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4493  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4494  * slow stations to starve).
4495  *
4496  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4497  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4498  */
4499 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4500 					   u32 thr);
4501 
4502 /**
4503  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4504  *
4505  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4506  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4507  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4508  *
4509  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4510  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4511  * @info: tx status information
4512  */
4513 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4514 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4515 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4516 
4517 /**
4518  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4519  *
4520  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4521  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4522  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4523  *
4524  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4525  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4526  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4527  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4528  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4529  *
4530  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4531  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4532  */
4533 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4534 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
4535 
4536 /**
4537  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4538  *
4539  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4540  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4541  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4542  *
4543  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4544  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4545  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4546  *
4547  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4548  * @status: tx status information
4549  */
4550 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4551 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4552 
4553 /**
4554  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4555  *
4556  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4557  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4558  * specific skbs.
4559  *
4560  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4561  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4562  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4563  *
4564  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4565  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4566  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
4567  * @info: tx status information
4568  */
4569 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4570 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4571 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4572 {
4573 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4574 		.sta = sta,
4575 		.info = info,
4576 	};
4577 
4578 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4579 }
4580 
4581 /**
4582  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4583  *
4584  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4585  *
4586  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4587  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4588  * for a single hardware.
4589  *
4590  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4591  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4592  */
4593 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4594 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
4595 {
4596 	local_bh_disable();
4597 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4598 	local_bh_enable();
4599 }
4600 
4601 /**
4602  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4603  *
4604  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4605  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4606  *
4607  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4608  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4609  *
4610  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4611  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4612  */
4613 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4614 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
4615 
4616 /**
4617  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4618  *
4619  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4620  * connected STA.
4621  *
4622  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4623  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4624  */
4625 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4626 
4627 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4628 
4629 /**
4630  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4631  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4632  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4633  * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4634  *	to CSA counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4635  *	should be ignored.
4636  */
4637 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4638 	u16 tim_offset;
4639 	u16 tim_length;
4640 
4641 	u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4642 };
4643 
4644 /**
4645  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4646  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4647  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4648  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4649  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4650  *
4651  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4652  * obtain the beacon template.
4653  *
4654  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4655  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4656  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4657  * applicable, the CSA count.
4658  *
4659  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4660  *
4661  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4662  */
4663 struct sk_buff *
4664 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4665 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4666 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4667 
4668 /**
4669  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4670  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4671  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4672  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4673  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4674  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4675  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
4676  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4677  *
4678  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4679  * obtain the beacon frame.
4680  *
4681  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4682  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4683  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4684  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4685  *
4686  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4687  *
4688  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4689  */
4690 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4691 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4692 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4693 
4694 /**
4695  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4696  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4697  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4698  *
4699  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4700  *
4701  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4702  */
4703 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4704 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4705 {
4706 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4707 }
4708 
4709 /**
4710  * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4711  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4712  *
4713  * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4714  * This function is called implicitly when
4715  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4716  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4717  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4718  *
4719  * Return: new csa counter value
4720  */
4721 u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4722 
4723 /**
4724  * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4725  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4726  * @counter: the new value for the counter
4727  *
4728  * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4729  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4730  *
4731  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4732  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4733  */
4734 void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4735 
4736 /**
4737  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4738  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4739  *
4740  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4741  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4742  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4743  */
4744 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4745 
4746 /**
4747  * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4748  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4749  *
4750  * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4751  */
4752 bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4753 
4754 
4755 /**
4756  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4757  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4758  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4759  *
4760  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4761  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4762  *
4763  * Can only be called in AP mode.
4764  *
4765  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4766  */
4767 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4768 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4769 
4770 /**
4771  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4772  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4773  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4774  *
4775  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4776  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4777  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4778  *
4779  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4780  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4781  *
4782  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4783  */
4784 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4785 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4786 
4787 /**
4788  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4789  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4790  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4791  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4792  *	if at all possible
4793  *
4794  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4795  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4796  * BSSID and address is used.
4797  *
4798  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4799  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4800  *
4801  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4802  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4803  *
4804  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4805  */
4806 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4807 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4808 				       bool qos_ok);
4809 
4810 /**
4811  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4812  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4813  * @src_addr: source MAC address
4814  * @ssid: SSID buffer
4815  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4816  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4817  *
4818  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4819  * hardware.
4820  *
4821  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4822  */
4823 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4824 				       const u8 *src_addr,
4825 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4826 				       size_t tailroom);
4827 
4828 /**
4829  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4830  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4831  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4832  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4833  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4834  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4835  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4836  *
4837  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4838  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4839  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4840  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4841  */
4842 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4843 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4844 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4845 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4846 
4847 /**
4848  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4849  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4850  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4851  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4852  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4853  *
4854  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4855  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4856  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4857  *
4858  * Return: The duration.
4859  */
4860 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4861 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4862 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4863 
4864 /**
4865  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4866  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4867  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4868  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4869  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4870  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4871  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4872  *
4873  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4874  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4875  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4876  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4877  */
4878 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4879 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4880 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4881 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4882 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4883 
4884 /**
4885  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4886  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4887  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4888  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4889  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4890  *
4891  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4892  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4893  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4894  *
4895  * Return: The duration.
4896  */
4897 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4898 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4899 				    size_t frame_len,
4900 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4901 
4902 /**
4903  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4904  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4905  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4906  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
4907  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
4908  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
4909  *
4910  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4911  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
4912  *
4913  * Return: The duration.
4914  */
4915 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4916 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4917 					enum nl80211_band band,
4918 					size_t frame_len,
4919 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
4920 
4921 /**
4922  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4923  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4924  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4925  *
4926  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4927  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4928  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4929  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
4930  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4931  *
4932  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4933  * frames are available.
4934  *
4935  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4936  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4937  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4938  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4939  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4940  * use common code for all beacons.
4941  */
4942 struct sk_buff *
4943 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4944 
4945 /**
4946  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4947  *
4948  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4949  *
4950  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4951  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4952  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4953  */
4954 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4955 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4956 
4957 /**
4958  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
4959  *
4960  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4961  * from the given packet.
4962  *
4963  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4964  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4965  *	with this P1K
4966  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4967  */
4968 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4969 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4970 {
4971 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4972 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4973 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4974 
4975 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4976 }
4977 
4978 /**
4979  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4980  *
4981  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4982  * and transmitter address.
4983  *
4984  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4985  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4986  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4987  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4988  */
4989 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4990 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4991 
4992 /**
4993  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4994  *
4995  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4996  * in the packet.
4997  *
4998  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4999  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5000  *	encrypted with this key
5001  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5002  */
5003 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5004 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5005 
5006 /**
5007  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5008  *
5009  * @pos: start of crypto header
5010  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5011  * @pn: PN to add
5012  *
5013  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5014  * the packet payload)
5015  *
5016  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5017  * point to the crypto header)
5018  */
5019 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5020 
5021 /**
5022  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5023  *
5024  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5025  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5026  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5027  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5028  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5029  *
5030  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5031  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5032  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5033  *
5034  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5035  * can be done concurrently.
5036  */
5037 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5038 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5039 
5040 /**
5041  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5042  *
5043  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5044  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5045  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5046  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5047  * @seq: new sequence data
5048  *
5049  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5050  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5051  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5052  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5053  *
5054  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5055  * can be done concurrently.
5056  */
5057 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5058 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5059 
5060 /**
5061  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5062  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5063  *
5064  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5065  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5066  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5067  *
5068  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5069  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5070  */
5071 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5072 
5073 /**
5074  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5075  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5076  * @keyconf: new key data
5077  *
5078  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5079  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5080  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5081  *
5082  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5083  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5084  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5085  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5086  *
5087  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5088  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5089  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5090  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5091  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5092  * of the reconfiguration.
5093  *
5094  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5095  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5096  *
5097  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5098  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5099  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5100  * the key that's being replaced.
5101  */
5102 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5103 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5104 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5105 
5106 /**
5107  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5108  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5109  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5110  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5111  * @gfp: allocation flags
5112  */
5113 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5114 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5115 
5116 /**
5117  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5118  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5119  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5120  *
5121  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5122  */
5123 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5124 
5125 /**
5126  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5127  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5128  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5129  *
5130  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5131  */
5132 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5133 
5134 /**
5135  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5136  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5137  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5138  *
5139  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5140  *
5141  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5142  */
5143 
5144 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5145 
5146 /**
5147  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5148  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5149  *
5150  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5151  */
5152 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5153 
5154 /**
5155  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5156  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5157  *
5158  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5159  */
5160 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5161 
5162 /**
5163  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5164  *
5165  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5166  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5167  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5168  * any context, including hardirq context.
5169  *
5170  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5171  * @info: information about the completed scan
5172  */
5173 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5174 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5175 
5176 /**
5177  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5178  *
5179  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5180  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5181  *
5182  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5183  */
5184 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5185 
5186 /**
5187  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5188  *
5189  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5190  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5191  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5192  * while associating, for instance.
5193  *
5194  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5195  */
5196 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5197 
5198 /**
5199  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5200  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5201  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5202  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5203  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5204  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5205  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5206  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5207  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5208  */
5209 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5210 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5211 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5212 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5213 };
5214 
5215 /**
5216  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5217  *
5218  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5219  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5220  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5221  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5222  *
5223  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5224  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5225  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5226  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5227  */
5228 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5229 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5230 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5231 				  void *data);
5232 
5233 /**
5234  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5235  *
5236  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5237  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5238  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5239  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5240  * be used.
5241  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5242  *
5243  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5244  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5245  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5246  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5247  */
5248 static inline void
5249 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5250 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5251 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5252 				    void *data)
5253 {
5254 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5255 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5256 				     iterator, data);
5257 }
5258 
5259 /**
5260  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5261  *
5262  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5263  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5264  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5265  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5266  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5267  *
5268  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5269  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5270  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5271  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5272  */
5273 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5274 						u32 iter_flags,
5275 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5276 						    u8 *mac,
5277 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5278 						void *data);
5279 
5280 /**
5281  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5282  *
5283  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5284  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5285  * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5286  *
5287  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5288  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5289  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5290  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5291  */
5292 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5293 					      u32 iter_flags,
5294 					      void (*iterator)(void *data,
5295 						u8 *mac,
5296 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5297 					      void *data);
5298 
5299 /**
5300  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5301  *
5302  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5303  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5304  * function for them.
5305  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5306  *
5307  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5308  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5309  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5310  */
5311 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5312 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5313 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5314 				       void *data);
5315 /**
5316  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5317  *
5318  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5319  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5320  *
5321  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5322  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5323  */
5324 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5325 
5326 /**
5327  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5328  *
5329  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5330  * workqueue.
5331  *
5332  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5333  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5334  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5335  */
5336 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5337 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5338 				  unsigned long delay);
5339 
5340 /**
5341  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5342  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5343  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5344  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5345  *
5346  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5347  *
5348  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5349  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5350  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5351  */
5352 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5353 				  u16 timeout);
5354 
5355 /**
5356  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5357  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5358  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5359  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5360  *
5361  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5362  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5363  * from any context.
5364  */
5365 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5366 				      u16 tid);
5367 
5368 /**
5369  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5370  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5371  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5372  *
5373  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5374  *
5375  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5376  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5377  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5378  */
5379 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5380 
5381 /**
5382  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5383  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5384  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5385  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5386  *
5387  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5388  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5389  * can be called from any context.
5390  */
5391 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5392 				     u16 tid);
5393 
5394 /**
5395  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5396  *
5397  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5398  * @addr: station's address
5399  *
5400  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5401  *
5402  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5403  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5404  */
5405 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5406 					 const u8 *addr);
5407 
5408 /**
5409  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5410  *
5411  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5412  * @addr: remote station's address
5413  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5414  *
5415  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5416  *
5417  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5418  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5419  *
5420  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5421  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5422  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5423  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5424  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5425  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5426  *      is not reliable.
5427  *
5428  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5429  */
5430 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5431 					       const u8 *addr,
5432 					       const u8 *localaddr);
5433 
5434 /**
5435  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5436  * @hw: the hardware
5437  * @pubsta: the station
5438  * @block: whether to block or unblock
5439  *
5440  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5441  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5442  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5443  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5444  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5445  *
5446  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5447  * manner.
5448  *
5449  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5450  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5451  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5452  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5453  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5454  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5455  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5456  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5457  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5458  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5459  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5460  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5461  * woke up while blocked or not.
5462  */
5463 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5464 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5465 
5466 /**
5467  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5468  * @pubsta: the station
5469  *
5470  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5471  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5472  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5473  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5474  *
5475  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5476  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5477  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5478  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5479  *
5480  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5481  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5482  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5483  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5484  */
5485 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5486 
5487 /**
5488  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5489  * @pubsta: the station
5490  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5491  *
5492  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5493  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5494  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5495  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5496  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5497  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5498  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5499  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5500  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5501  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5502  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5503  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5504  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5505  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5506  */
5507 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5508 
5509 /**
5510  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5511  *
5512  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
5513  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5514  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5515  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5516  *
5517  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5518  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5519  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5520  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5521  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5522  * attempts.
5523  *
5524  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5525  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5526  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5527  * them to 0.
5528  *
5529  * @pubsta: the station
5530  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5531  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5532  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5533  */
5534 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5535 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5536 
5537 /**
5538  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5539  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5540  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5541  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5542  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5543  *
5544  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5545  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5546  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5547  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5548  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5549  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5550  *
5551  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5552  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5553  * set_key callback.
5554  */
5555 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5556 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5557 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5558 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5559 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5560 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5561 				      void *data),
5562 			 void *iter_data);
5563 
5564 /**
5565  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5566  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5567  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5568  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5569  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5570  *
5571  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5572  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5573  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5574  * in removal process will be skipped.
5575  *
5576  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5577  * and thus iter must be atomic.
5578  */
5579 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5580 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5581 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5582 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5583 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5584 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5585 					  void *data),
5586 			     void *iter_data);
5587 
5588 /**
5589  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5590  * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5591  * @iter: iterator function
5592  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5593  *
5594  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5595  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5596  * places while calling into the driver.
5597  *
5598  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5599  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5600  * removed.
5601  *
5602  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5603  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5604  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5605  * or not.
5606  */
5607 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5608 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5609 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5610 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5611 		     void *data),
5612 	void *iter_data);
5613 
5614 /**
5615  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5616  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5617  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5618  *
5619  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5620  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5621  * information. This function must only be called from within the
5622  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5623  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5624  * %NULL.
5625  *
5626  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5627  */
5628 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5629 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5630 
5631 /**
5632  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5633  *
5634  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5635  *
5636  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5637  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5638  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5639  */
5640 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5641 
5642 /**
5643  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5644  *
5645  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5646  *
5647  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5648  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5649  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5650  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5651  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5652  *
5653  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5654  * without connection recovery attempts.
5655  */
5656 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5657 
5658 /**
5659  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5660  *
5661  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5662  *
5663  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5664  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5665  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5666  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5667  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5668  *
5669  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5670  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5671  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5672  * disconnect normally later.
5673  *
5674  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5675  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5676  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5677  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5678  */
5679 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5680 
5681 /**
5682  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5683  *	rssi threshold triggered
5684  *
5685  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5686  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5687  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5688  * @gfp: context flags
5689  *
5690  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5691  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5692  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5693  */
5694 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5695 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5696 			       s32 rssi_level,
5697 			       gfp_t gfp);
5698 
5699 /**
5700  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5701  *
5702  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5703  * @gfp: context flags
5704  */
5705 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5706 
5707 /**
5708  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5709  *
5710  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5711  */
5712 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5713 
5714 /**
5715  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5716  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5717  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5718  *
5719  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5720  * and wake up the suspended queues.
5721  */
5722 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5723 
5724 /**
5725  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5726  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5727  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5728  *
5729  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5730  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5731  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5732  */
5733 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5734 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5735 
5736 /**
5737  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5738  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5739  */
5740 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5741 
5742 /**
5743  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5744  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5745  */
5746 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5747 
5748 /**
5749  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5750  *
5751  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5752  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5753  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5754  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5755  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5756  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5757  *
5758  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5759  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5760  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5761  */
5762 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5763 				  const u8 *addr);
5764 
5765 /**
5766  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5767  * @pubsta: station struct
5768  * @tid: the session's TID
5769  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5770  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
5771  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5772  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5773  *
5774  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5775  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5776  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5777  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5778  */
5779 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5780 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5781 					  u16 received_mpdus);
5782 
5783 /**
5784  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5785  *
5786  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5787  * buffer.
5788  *
5789  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5790  * @ra: the peer's destination address
5791  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5792  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5793  */
5794 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5795 
5796 /**
5797  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5798  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5799  * @addr: station mac address
5800  * @tid: the rx tid
5801  */
5802 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5803 				 unsigned int tid);
5804 
5805 /**
5806  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5807  *
5808  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5809  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5810  * reordering.
5811  *
5812  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5813  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5814  *
5815  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5816  * @addr: station mac address
5817  * @tid: the rx tid
5818  */
5819 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5820 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5821 {
5822 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5823 		return;
5824 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5825 }
5826 
5827 /**
5828  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5829  *
5830  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5831  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5832  * reordering.
5833  *
5834  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5835  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5836  *
5837  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5838  * @addr: station mac address
5839  * @tid: the rx tid
5840  */
5841 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5842 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5843 {
5844 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5845 		return;
5846 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5847 }
5848 
5849 /**
5850  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5851  *
5852  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5853  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5854  *
5855  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5856  *
5857  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5858  * @addr: station mac address
5859  * @tid: the rx tid
5860  */
5861 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5862 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5863 
5864 /* Rate control API */
5865 
5866 /**
5867  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5868  *
5869  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5870  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5871  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5872  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5873  *	to be filled in
5874  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5875  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5876  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5877  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5878  *	RTS threshold
5879  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5880  *	if the selected rate supports it
5881  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
5882  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
5883  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
5884  */
5885 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5886 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5887 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5888 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5889 	struct sk_buff *skb;
5890 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5891 	bool rts, short_preamble;
5892 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
5893 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
5894 	bool bss;
5895 };
5896 
5897 /**
5898  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5899  */
5900 enum rate_control_capabilities {
5901 	/**
5902 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5903 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
5904 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
5905 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
5906 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
5907 	 */
5908 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
5909 };
5910 
5911 struct rate_control_ops {
5912 	unsigned long capa;
5913 	const char *name;
5914 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
5915 	void (*free)(void *priv);
5916 
5917 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5918 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5919 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5920 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
5921 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5922 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5923 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5924 			    u32 changed);
5925 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5926 			 void *priv_sta);
5927 
5928 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5929 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5930 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
5931 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5932 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5933 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
5934 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5935 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5936 
5937 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5938 				struct dentry *dir);
5939 	void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
5940 
5941 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
5942 };
5943 
5944 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5945 				 enum nl80211_band band,
5946 				 int index)
5947 {
5948 	return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5949 }
5950 
5951 /**
5952  * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5953  *
5954  * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5955  * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5956  * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5957  * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5958  * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5959  * not null.
5960  *
5961  * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5962  * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5963  *
5964  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5965  * 	that this may be null.
5966  * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5967  * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5968  */
5969 bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5970 			   void *priv_sta,
5971 			   struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5972 
5973 
5974 static inline s8
5975 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5976 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5977 {
5978 	int i;
5979 
5980 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5981 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5982 			return i;
5983 
5984 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
5985 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
5986 
5987 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
5988 	return 0;
5989 }
5990 
5991 static inline
5992 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5993 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5994 {
5995 	unsigned int i;
5996 
5997 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5998 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5999 			return true;
6000 	return false;
6001 }
6002 
6003 /**
6004  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6005  *
6006  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6007  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6008  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6009  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6010  *
6011  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6012  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6013  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6014  */
6015 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6016 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6017 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6018 
6019 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6020 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6021 
6022 static inline bool
6023 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6024 {
6025 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6026 }
6027 
6028 static inline bool
6029 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6030 {
6031 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6032 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6033 }
6034 
6035 static inline bool
6036 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6037 {
6038 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6039 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6040 }
6041 
6042 static inline bool
6043 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6044 {
6045 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6046 }
6047 
6048 static inline bool
6049 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6050 {
6051 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6052 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6053 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6054 }
6055 
6056 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6057 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6058 {
6059 	if (p2p) {
6060 		switch (type) {
6061 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6062 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6063 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6064 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6065 		default:
6066 			break;
6067 		}
6068 	}
6069 	return type;
6070 }
6071 
6072 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6073 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6074 {
6075 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6076 }
6077 
6078 /**
6079  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6080  *
6081  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6082  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6083  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6084  *
6085  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6086  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6087  * matching GroupId management frame.
6088  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6089  */
6090 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6091 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6092 
6093 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6094 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6095 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6096 
6097 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6098 
6099 /**
6100  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6101  *
6102  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6103  *
6104  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6105  *
6106  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6107  * applicable.
6108  */
6109 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6110 
6111 /**
6112  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6113  * @vif: virtual interface
6114  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6115  * @gfp: allocation flags
6116  *
6117  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6118  */
6119 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6120 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6121 				    gfp_t gfp);
6122 
6123 /**
6124  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6125  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6126  * @vif: virtual interface
6127  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6128  * @band: the band to transmit on
6129  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6130  *
6131  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6132  */
6133 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6134 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6135 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6136 
6137 /**
6138  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6139  *
6140  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6141  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6142  *
6143  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6144  *
6145  * private:
6146  *
6147  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6148  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6149  */
6150 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6151 	u32 next_tsf;
6152 	bool has_next_tsf;
6153 
6154 	u8 absent;
6155 
6156 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6157 	struct {
6158 		u32 start;
6159 		u32 duration;
6160 		u32 interval;
6161 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6162 };
6163 
6164 /**
6165  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6166  *
6167  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6168  * @data: NoA tracking data
6169  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6170  *
6171  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6172  */
6173 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6174 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6175 
6176 /**
6177  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6178  *
6179  * @data: NoA tracking data
6180  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6181  */
6182 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6183 
6184 /**
6185  * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6186  * @vif: virtual interface
6187  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6188  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6189  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6190  * @gfp: allocation flags
6191  *
6192  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6193  */
6194 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6195 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6196 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6197 
6198 /**
6199  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6200  *
6201  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6202  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6203  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6204  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6205  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6206  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6207  *
6208  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6209  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6210  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6211  *
6212  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6213  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6214  *
6215  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6216  */
6217 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6218 
6219 /**
6220  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6221  *
6222  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6223  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6224  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6225  *
6226  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6227  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6228  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6229  *
6230  * @sta: the station
6231  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6232  */
6233 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6234 
6235 /**
6236  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6237  *
6238  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6239  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6240  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6241  *
6242  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6243  *
6244  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6245  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6246  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6247  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6248  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6249  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6250  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6251  */
6252 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6253 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6254 
6255 /**
6256  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6257  *
6258  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6259  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6260  *
6261  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6262  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6263  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6264  */
6265 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6266 
6267 /**
6268  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6269  *
6270  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6271  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6272  *
6273  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6274  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6275  */
6276 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6277 
6278 /* (deprecated) */
6279 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6280 {
6281 }
6282 
6283 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6284 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6285 
6286 /**
6287  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6288  *
6289  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6290  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6291  *
6292  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6293  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6294  *
6295  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6296  * this TXQ internally.
6297  */
6298 static inline void
6299 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6300 {
6301 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6302 }
6303 
6304 /**
6305  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6306  *
6307  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6308  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6309  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6310  *
6311  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6312  * internally.
6313  */
6314 static inline void
6315 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6316 		     bool force)
6317 {
6318 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6319 }
6320 
6321 /**
6322  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6323  *
6324  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6325  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6326  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6327  * next_txq().
6328  *
6329  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6330  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6331  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6332  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6333  * again.
6334  *
6335  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6336  * aligned aginst driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6337  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6338  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6339  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6340  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6341  *
6342  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6343  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6344  */
6345 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6346 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6347 
6348 /**
6349  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6350  *
6351  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6352  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6353  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6354  *
6355  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6356  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6357  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6358  */
6359 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6360 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6361 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6362 
6363 /**
6364  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6365  *
6366  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6367  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6368  *
6369  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6370  * @inst_id: the local instance id
6371  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6372  * @gfp: allocation flags
6373  */
6374 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6375 				   u8 inst_id,
6376 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6377 				   gfp_t gfp);
6378 
6379 /**
6380  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6381  *
6382  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6383  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6384  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6385  *
6386  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6387  * @match: match event information
6388  * @gfp: allocation flags
6389  */
6390 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6391 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6392 			      gfp_t gfp);
6393 
6394 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6395